1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

RV Covers For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2281–2320 of 2330 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building | Steel and Stud, From $78,750

12

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$89,750$78,750SAVE $11,000
or $1641/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×70Retail / Showroom Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 60×70 retail / showroom building? At 4200 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Display equipment, furniture, vehicles, building supplies, or inventory in a clear-span.

You’re viewing:Retail / Showroom Building·Size60×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$78,750$89,750Save $11,000
or as low as $1641/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×70
60×70
this size
$78,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,200 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Storefront
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X70-RETAIL-SHOWROOM-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

60 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Looking for a 60×70 retail / showroom building? At 4200 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE60′ × 70′ · 4,200 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~2520 sf showroom, 1260 sf stock. Display equipment, furniture, vehicles, building supplies, or inventory in a clear-span showroom with storefront glass, customer entries, insulation, and branded color packages.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×70 Retail / Showroom Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail / Showroom Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail / Showroom Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail / Showroom Building.

DAILY USEEveryday retail / showroom building
Everyday retail / showroom building
4,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail / showroom building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail / showroom building + seasonal storage
retail / showroom building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building, what makes it different.

4,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1641/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×70 retail / showroom building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1641/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×70?

4,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 70′ footprint with 4,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $33,600–$50,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail / Showroom Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×70 Retail / Showroom Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×70 Retail / Showroom Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail / Showroom Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,900+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail / Showroom Building also viewed:

🏢 60×70

Commercial Warehouse

60×70 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 60×70

Fleet Garage

60×70 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 60×70

Farm Equipment Building

60×70 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 60×70

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

60×70 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$79,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 60×70

RV & Boat Storage

60×70 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 60×70

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×70 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 60×70

Auto Shop / Service Building

60×70 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 60×70

Horse Barn / Riding Space

60×70 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 60×70

Municipal / Government Building

60×70 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏭 60×70

Contractor Storage Building

60×70 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$79,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

🏛️ 60×70

Community / Worship Hall

60×70 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail / Showroom Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×70 retail / showroom building cost?

A 60×70 retail / showroom building from Steel and Stud starts at $78,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1641/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×70 retail / showroom building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail / showroom building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×70 retail / showroom building?

Almost always for 4,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail / showroom building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×70 retail / showroom building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×70 retail / showroom building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×70 retail / showroom building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1641/month on a 60×70 retail / showroom building.

What warranty comes with the 60×70 retail / showroom building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×70 retail / showroom building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×70 retail / showroom building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail / Showroom Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$78,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal commercial metal building with full glass gable storefront and customer parking out front

60×70 Retail / Showroom Building

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$78,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with vertical steel panels sheltering a green tractor on a gravel farm lot

60×70 Contractor Storage Building

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×70 Contractor Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $79,150

12

60×70 Contractor Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$90,250$79,150SAVE $11,100
or $1649/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×70Contractor Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×70 Contractor Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 60×70 contractor storage building packs 4200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Secure storage for tools, lifts, scaffolding, materials, trailers.

You’re viewing:Contractor Storage Building·Size60×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$79,150$90,250Save $11,100
or as low as $1649/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×70
60×70
this size
$79,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,200 sq ft enclosed
  • From $34,500
  • Secure Storage
  • Large Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X70-CONTRACTOR-STORABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

60 feet wide × 70 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 60×70 contractor storage building packs 4200 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk60′ × 70′ · 4,200 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. Secure storage for tools, lifts, scaffolding, materials, trailers, generators, and jobsite equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Storage Building at 60×70, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×70 Contractor Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Storage Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor storage building
Everyday contractor storage building
4,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor storage building + seasonal storage
contractor storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×70 Contractor Storage Building, what makes it different.

4,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1649/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×70 contractor storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1649/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×70?

4,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 70′ footprint with 4,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $33,600–$50,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×70 Contractor Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×70 Contractor Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,900+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 60×70

Commercial Warehouse

60×70 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 60×70

Fleet Garage

60×70 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 60×70

Farm Equipment Building

60×70 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 60×70

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

60×70 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$79,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 60×70

RV & Boat Storage

60×70 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 60×70

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×70 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 60×70

Auto Shop / Service Building

60×70 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 60×70

Horse Barn / Riding Space

60×70 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 60×70

Municipal / Government Building

60×70 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 60×70

Retail / Showroom Building

60×70 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏛️ 60×70

Community / Worship Hall

60×70 community / worship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Community / Worship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×70 contractor storage building cost?

A 60×70 contractor storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $79,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1649/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×70 contractor storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×70 contractor storage building?

Almost always for 4,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×70 contractor storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×70 contractor storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×70 contractor storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1649/month on a 60×70 contractor storage building.

What warranty comes with the 60×70 contractor storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×70 contractor storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×70 contractor storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 60×70 contractor storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$79,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with vertical steel panels sheltering a green tractor on a gravel farm lot

60×70 Contractor Storage Building

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$79,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building event venue glowing at dusk with string lights and patio seating

60×70 Community / Worship Hall

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×70 Community / Worship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $78,850

12

60×70 Community / Worship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$89,900$78,850SAVE $11,050
or $1643/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×70Community / Worship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×70 Community / Worship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 60×70 community / worship hall fits 60-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Column-free interior for fellowship halls, community rooms, multipurpose.

You’re viewing:Community / Worship Hall·Size60×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$78,850$89,900Save $11,050
or as low as $1643/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×70
60×70
this size
$78,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,200 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X70-COMMUNITY-WORSHIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

60 feet wide × 70 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Our 60×70 community / worship hall fits 60-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS60′ × 70′ · 4,200 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~420 in main sanctuary. Column-free interior for fellowship halls, community rooms, multipurpose worship space, event storage, classrooms, or nonprofit operations with insulation and code-certified plans.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×70 Community / Worship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Community / Worship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,200 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Community / Worship Hall spec sheet.

Width60′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,200 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Community / Worship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday community / worship hall
Everyday community / worship hall
4,200 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a community / worship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommunity / worship hall + seasonal storage
community / worship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×70 Community / Worship Hall, what makes it different.

4,200sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1643/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×70 community / worship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1643/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×70?

4,200 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 70′ footprint with 4,200 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $33,600–$50,400 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Community / Worship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×70 Community / Worship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×70 Community / Worship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Community / Worship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$18,900+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Community / Worship Hall also viewed:

🏢 60×70

Commercial Warehouse

60×70 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 60×70

Fleet Garage

60×70 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 60×70

Farm Equipment Building

60×70 farm equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Farm Equipment Building →

🏭 60×70

Manufacturing / Light Industrial

60×70 manufacturing / light industrial configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$79,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Light Industrial →

🏡 60×70

RV & Boat Storage

60×70 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🎯 60×70

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×70 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$76,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏢 60×70

Auto Shop / Service Building

60×70 auto shop / service building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Shop / Service Building →

🌾 60×70

Horse Barn / Riding Space

60×70 horse barn / riding space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$77,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Barn / Riding Space →

🏛️ 60×70

Municipal / Government Building

60×70 municipal / government building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Building →

🏢 60×70

Retail / Showroom Building

60×70 retail / showroom building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$78,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail / Showroom Building →

🏭 60×70

Contractor Storage Building

60×70 contractor storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$79,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Building →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Community / Worship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 60×70 community / worship hall cost?

A 60×70 community / worship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $78,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1643/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×70 community / worship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud community / worship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×70 community / worship hall?

Almost always for 4,200+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud community / worship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×70 community / worship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×70 community / worship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×70 community / worship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1643/month on a 60×70 community / worship hall.

What warranty comes with the 60×70 community / worship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×70 community / worship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×70 community / worship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Community / Worship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$78,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building event venue glowing at dusk with string lights and patio seating

60×70 Community / Worship Hall

4,200 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×70 steel building delivers 4,200 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$78,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

60×80 Commercial Warehouse

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Commercial Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

60×80 Commercial Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Commercial Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Commercial Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

4,800 sq ft warehouse for inventory, pallet racking, contractor storage, equipment staging, shipping, receiving, and forklift access. Add dock-ready openings, insulation, and stamped engineered drawings.

You’re viewing:Commercial Warehouse·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-COMMERCIAL-WAREHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. 4,800 sq ft warehouse for inventory, pallet racking, contractor storage, equipment staging, shipping, receiving, and forklift access.

Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOFFICE + BREAK ROOM60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~96 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Add dock-ready openings, insulation, and stamped engineered drawings.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Commercial Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Warehouse spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial warehouse
Everyday commercial warehouse
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial warehouse + seasonal storage
commercial warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Commercial Warehouse, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 commercial warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Commercial Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Commercial Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 commercial warehouse cost?

A 60×80 commercial warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 commercial warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 commercial warehouse?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 commercial warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 commercial warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 commercial warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 60×80 commercial warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 commercial warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 commercial warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×80 commercial warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building warehouse with loading docks, box truck, and stacked pallets

60×80 Commercial Warehouse

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $90,100

12

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,700$90,100SAVE $12,600
or $1877/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Upgrade to 12-gauge or red iron framing for heavier shop requirements.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,100$102,700Save $12,600
or as low as $1877/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$90,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $34,000
  • Fabrication Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Looking for a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Upgrade to 12-gauge or red iron framing for heavier shop requirements.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing / fabrication shop
Everyday manufacturing / fabrication shop
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing / fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing / fabrication shop + seasonal storage
manufacturing / fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1877/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1877/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop cost?

A 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $90,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1877/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing / fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing / fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1877/month on a 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Bright metal building distribution warehouse interior with forklift, conveyor line, and racking

60×80 Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with red roof and three bays housing fleet box trucks

60×80 Fleet Garage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

60×80 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Fleet Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Fleet parking and service space for work trucks, vans, trailers, municipal vehicles, and utility equipment. Multiple roll-up doors keep vehicle traffic moving efficiently.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $39,500
  • Multi-Bay
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Fleet parking and service space for work trucks, vans, trailers, municipal vehicles, and utility equipment.

6 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

6 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

6 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 6 vehicles + full hobby shop. Multiple roll-up doors keep vehicle traffic moving efficiently.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Fleet Garage, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 fleet garage cost?

A 60×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 fleet garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 fleet garage?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 60×80 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×80 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with red roof and three bays housing fleet box trucks

60×80 Fleet Garage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Distribution / Fulfillment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Built for storage, packing, sorting, small distribution, contractor staging, and.

You’re viewing:Distribution / Fulfillment Building·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $32,500
  • Dock Ready
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-DISTRIBUTION-FULBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Looking for a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building? At 4800 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOFFICE + BREAK ROOM60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~96 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Built for storage, packing, sorting, small distribution, contractor staging, and wholesale inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution / Fulfillment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution / Fulfillment Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution / Fulfillment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution / fulfillment building
Everyday distribution / fulfillment building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution / fulfillment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution / fulfillment building + seasonal storage
distribution / fulfillment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution / Fulfillment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution / Fulfillment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution / Fulfillment Building also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution / Fulfillment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building cost?

A 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution / fulfillment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution / fulfillment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×80 distribution / fulfillment building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution / Fulfillment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

60×80 Distribution / Fulfillment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building fabrication shop at sunset with skid steer and steel stock

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building | Steel and Stud, From $88,500

12

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,900$88,500SAVE $12,400
or $1844/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Agricultural Equipment Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Store tractors, hay equipment, feed, implements, trailers, livestock supplies, and farm machinery. Add lean-tos, oversized doors, ventilation, and heavy-duty framing.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Equipment Building·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$88,500$100,900Save $12,400
or as low as $1844/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$88,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $32,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-AGRICULTURAL-EQUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your agricultural equipment building layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Store tractors, hay equipment, feed, implements, trailers, livestock supplies, and farm machinery.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · agricultural equipment building layout

Agricultural Equipment Building layout.

Store tractors, hay equipment, feed, implements, trailers, livestock supplies, and farm machinery. Add lean-tos, oversized doors, ventilation, and heavy-duty framing.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Equipment Building at 60×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Equipment Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Equipment Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Equipment Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural equipment building
Everyday agricultural equipment building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural equipment building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural equipment building + seasonal storage
agricultural equipment building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1844/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 agricultural equipment building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1844/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Equipment Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Equipment Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Equipment Building also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Equipment Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 agricultural equipment building cost?

A 60×80 agricultural equipment building from Steel and Stud starts at $88,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1844/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 agricultural equipment building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural equipment building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 agricultural equipment building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural equipment building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 agricultural equipment building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 agricultural equipment building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 agricultural equipment building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1844/month on a 60×80 agricultural equipment building.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 agricultural equipment building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 agricultural equipment building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 agricultural equipment building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Equipment Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan prefab metal building fabrication shop at sunset with skid steer and steel stock

60×80 Agricultural Equipment Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Espresso brown steel building with tall open bays storing a fifth-wheel RV and center console boat

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $87,850

12

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,150$87,850SAVE $12,300
or $1830/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80RV / Boat Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building, built for daily backyard use.

Our 60×80 rv / boat storage building fits 60-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Protect motorhomes, boats, fifth wheels, trailers, side-by-sides.

You’re viewing:RV / Boat Storage Building·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$87,850$100,150Save $12,300
or as low as $1830/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$87,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $27,500
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Oversized Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-RV-BOAT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Our 60×80 rv / boat storage building fits 60-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A’s or RV + boat + daily driver. Protect motorhomes, boats, fifth wheels, trailers, side-by-sides, collector vehicles, and seasonal equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Storage Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat storage building
Everyday rv / boat storage building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat storage building + seasonal storage
rv / boat storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1830/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 rv / boat storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1830/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 rv / boat storage building cost?

A 60×80 rv / boat storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $87,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1830/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 rv / boat storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv / boat storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 rv / boat storage building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 rv / boat storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 rv / boat storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 rv / boat storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1830/month on a 60×80 rv / boat storage building.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 rv / boat storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 rv / boat storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 60×80 rv / boat storage building add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 60×80 rv / boat storage building typically adds $38,400–$57,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Espresso brown steel building with tall open bays storing a fifth-wheel RV and center console boat

60×80 RV / Boat Storage Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building furniture showroom with glass walls and patio seating displays outside

60×80 Retail Showroom

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Retail Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

60×80 Retail Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Retail Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Retail Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Showroom space for vehicles, RVs, equipment, furniture, building supplies, or retail inventory. Add storefront glazing, insulation, offices, and branded exterior finishes.

You’re viewing:Retail Showroom·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Storefront Ready
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Showroom space for vehicles, RVs, equipment, furniture, building supplies, or retail inventory.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~2880 sf showroom, 1440 sf stock. Add storefront glazing, insulation, offices, and branded exterior finishes.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Retail Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail Showroom spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail showroom
Everyday retail showroom
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail showroom + seasonal storage
retail showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Retail Showroom, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 retail showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Retail Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Retail Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail Showroom also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 retail showroom cost?

A 60×80 retail showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 retail showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud retail showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 retail showroom?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 retail showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 retail showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 retail showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 60×80 retail showroom.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 retail showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 retail showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 60×80 retail showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building furniture showroom with glass walls and patio seating displays outside

60×80 Retail Showroom

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building interior basketball court with wood floor, wall pads, and players shooting

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility | Steel and Stud, From $87,850

12

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,150$87,850SAVE $12,300
or $1830/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Indoor Sports / Training Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

60×80 delivers 4800 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor sports / training facility space.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports / Training Facility·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$87,850$100,150Save $12,300
or as low as $1830/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$87,850
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $31,500
  • Insulated
  • Clear Span
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-INDOOR-SPORTS-TRBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. 60×80 delivers 4800 sq ft of hobby-ready indoor sports / training facility space.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Sports / Training Facility at 60×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports / Training Facility spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports / Training Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports / training facility
Everyday indoor sports / training facility
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports / training facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports / training facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1830/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 indoor sports / training facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1830/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports / Training Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports / Training Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports / Training Facility also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports / Training Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility cost?

A 60×80 indoor sports / training facility from Steel and Stud starts at $87,850 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1830/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 indoor sports / training facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports / training facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1830/month on a 60×80 indoor sports / training facility.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 indoor sports / training facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 indoor sports / training facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 60×80 indoor sports / training facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports / training facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports / Training Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building interior basketball court with wood floor, wall pads, and players shooting

60×80 Indoor Sports / Training Facility

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$87,850.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with blue roof sheltering a backhoe at a busy public works yard

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building | Steel and Stud, From $89,800

12

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,350$89,800SAVE $12,550
or $1871/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Municipal / Public Works Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 60×80 municipal / public works building fits 60-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Public works storage, emergency response staging, park maintenance.

You’re viewing:Municipal / Public Works Building·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,800$102,350Save $12,550
or as low as $1871/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • Permit Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-MUNICIPAL-PUBLICBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal / public works building layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 60×80 municipal / public works building fits 60-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · municipal / public works building layout

Municipal / Public Works Building layout.

Our 60×80 municipal / public works building fits 60-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Public works storage, emergency response staging, park maintenance, utility vehicle storage, and municipal fleet protection with engineered drawings and high-wind upgrades available.

💡 Pro tip:Municipal / Public Works Building at 60×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Public Works Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Public Works Building spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Public Works Building.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / public works building
Everyday municipal / public works building
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / public works building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / public works building + seasonal storage
municipal / public works building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1871/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 municipal / public works building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1871/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Public Works Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Public Works Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Public Works Building also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Public Works Building questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 municipal / public works building cost?

A 60×80 municipal / public works building from Steel and Stud starts at $89,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1871/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 municipal / public works building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal / public works building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 municipal / public works building?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / public works building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 municipal / public works building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 municipal / public works building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 municipal / public works building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1871/month on a 60×80 municipal / public works building.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 municipal / public works building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 municipal / public works building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 municipal / public works building pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Public Works Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with blue roof sheltering a backhoe at a busy public works yard

60×80 Municipal / Public Works Building

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior storing a motorhome, jet ski, and bass boat on clean concrete

60×80 Service / Repair Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Service / Repair Shop | Steel and Stud, From $90,100

12

60×80 Service / Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,700$90,100SAVE $12,600
or $1877/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Service / Repair Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Service / Repair Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 60×80 service / repair shop packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Set up vehicle repair, equipment service, contractor operations, fabrication.

You’re viewing:Service / Repair Shop·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,100$102,700Save $12,600
or as low as $1877/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$90,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $33,500
  • Lift Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-SERVICE-REPAIR-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your service / repair shop layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 60×80 service / repair shop packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · service / repair shop layout

Service / Repair Shop layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 60×80 service / repair shop packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Set up vehicle repair, equipment service, contractor operations, fabrication, or a mixed-use shop with large doors, wide bays, and open floor space for lifts or machinery.

💡 Pro tip:Service / Repair Shop at 60×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Service / Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Service / Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Service / Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Service / Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday service / repair shop
Everyday service / repair shop
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a service / repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWservice / repair shop + seasonal storage
service / repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Service / Repair Shop, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1877/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 service / repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1877/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Service / Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Service / Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Service / Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Service / Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Service / Repair Shop also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Service / Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 service / repair shop cost?

A 60×80 service / repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $90,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1877/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 service / repair shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud service / repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 service / repair shop?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud service / repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 service / repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 service / repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 service / repair shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1877/month on a 60×80 service / repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 service / repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 service / repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 service / repair shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 60×80 service / repair shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Service / Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior storing a motorhome, jet ski, and bass boat on clean concrete

60×80 Service / Repair Shop

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage | Steel and Stud, From $88,500

12

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$100,900$88,500SAVE $12,400
or $1844/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Hay Barn / Feed Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 60×80 hay barn / feed storage packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Large covered storage for hay, feed, bedding, seed, small implements, and farm materials. Open-sided.

You’re viewing:Hay Barn / Feed Storage·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$88,500$100,900Save $12,400
or as low as $1844/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$88,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • From $21,500
  • Ventilated
  • Ag Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-HAY-BARN-FEED-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 60×80 hay barn / feed storage packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Large covered storage for hay, feed, bedding, seed, small implements, and farm materials.

💡 Pro tip:Hay Barn / Feed Storage at 60×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Barn / Feed Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Barn / Feed Storage spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Barn / Feed Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday hay barn / feed storage
Everyday hay barn / feed storage
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay barn / feed storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay barn / feed storage + seasonal storage
hay barn / feed storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1844/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 hay barn / feed storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1844/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Barn / Feed Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Barn / Feed Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Barn / Feed Storage also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🏛️ 60×80

Worship / Fellowship Hall

60×80 worship / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Barn / Feed Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage cost?

A 60×80 hay barn / feed storage from Steel and Stud starts at $88,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1844/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 hay barn / feed storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay barn / feed storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay barn / feed storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1844/month on a 60×80 hay barn / feed storage.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 hay barn / feed storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 hay barn / feed storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 hay barn / feed storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Barn / Feed Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior stacked with square hay bales beneath timber roof trusses

60×80 Hay Barn / Feed Storage

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$88,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit church at twilight with glowing stained glass window and cross

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud, From $89,800

12

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,350$89,800SAVE $12,550
or $1871/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings60×80Worship / Fellowship Hall

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 60×80 worship / fellowship hall packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

You’re viewing:Worship / Fellowship Hall·Size60×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,800$102,350Save $12,550
or as low as $1871/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 60×80
60×80
this size
$89,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,800 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-60X80-WORSHIP-FELLOWSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

60 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 60×80 worship / fellowship hall packs 4800 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS60′ × 80′ · 4,800 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~480 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,800 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 60×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width60′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,800 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship / fellowship hall
Everyday worship / fellowship hall
4,800 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall, what makes it different.

4,800sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1871/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 60×80 worship / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1871/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 60×80?

4,800 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 60′ × 80′ footprint with 4,800 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $38,400–$57,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 60×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 60×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
61×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$21,600+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 60×80

Commercial Warehouse

60×80 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🏭 60×80

Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop

60×80 manufacturing / fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing / Fabrication Shop →

🏢 60×80

Fleet Garage

60×80 fleet garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage →

🏢 60×80

Distribution / Fulfillment Building

60×80 distribution / fulfillment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution / Fulfillment Building →

🌾 60×80

Agricultural Equipment Building

60×80 agricultural equipment building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Equipment Building →

🏡 60×80

RV / Boat Storage Building

60×80 rv / boat storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Storage Building →

🏢 60×80

Retail Showroom

60×80 retail showroom configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Retail Showroom →

🎯 60×80

Indoor Sports / Training Facility

60×80 indoor sports / training facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$87,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports / Training Facility →

🏛️ 60×80

Municipal / Public Works Building

60×80 municipal / public works building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Public Works Building →

🏭 60×80

Service / Repair Shop

60×80 service / repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Service / Repair Shop →

🌾 60×80

Hay Barn / Feed Storage

60×80 hay barn / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$88,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn / Feed Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall cost?

A 60×80 worship / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $89,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1871/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 60×80 worship / fellowship hall price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud worship / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 4,800+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1871/month on a 60×80 worship / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 60×80 worship / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 60×80 worship / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 60×80 worship / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green metal building kit church at twilight with glowing stained glass window and cross

60×80 Worship / Fellowship Hall

4,800 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

60′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 60×80 steel building delivers 4,800 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

70×70 Distribution Warehouse

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud, From $91,550

12

70×70 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,350$91,550SAVE $12,800
or $1907/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Distribution Warehouse

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 70×70 distribution warehouse? At 4900 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. Distribution operators size into the 70×70 when they need six semi-truck bays with room for.

You’re viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,550$104,350Save $12,800
or as low as $1907/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,550
70×100
longer
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 14×14 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Looking for a 70×70 distribution warehouse? At 4900 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Dock-height loading bayPALLET AISLESOffice + Break room70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~98 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Distribution operators size into the 70×70 when they need six semi-truck bays with room for forklift turns.

💡 Pro tip:6 Semi Bays. Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Distribution Warehouse, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1907/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1907/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 distribution warehouse cost?

A 70×70 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $91,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1907/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 distribution warehouse price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1907/month on a 70×70 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 70×70 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

70×70 Distribution Warehouse

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

70×70 Fabrication Shop

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $91,950

12

70×70 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,800$91,950SAVE $12,850
or $1916/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 70×70 fabrication shop fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Fabricators run plasma tables, press brakes, and overhead cranes inside a 70×70 fab.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,950$104,800Save $12,850
or as low as $1916/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,950
70×100
longer
$130,400
100×70
wider
$130,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready Ridge
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 70×70 fabrication shop fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Fabricators run plasma tables, press brakes, and overhead cranes inside a 70×70 fab shop.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span 70 ft. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1916/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1916/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 fabrication shop cost?

A 70×70 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $91,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1916/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1916/month on a 70×70 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 70×70 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

70×70 Fabrication Shop

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white trim, twin cupolas and open hay bay on a sunset farmstead

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $90,350

12

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$103,000$90,350SAVE $12,650
or $1882/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Farmers stack hay bales eight high and park combines, sprayers, and grain.

You’re viewing:Hay Barn & Equipment Storage·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,350$103,000Save $12,650
or as low as $1882/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$90,350
70×100
longer
$128,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • R-13 Vapor Barrier
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-HAY-BARN-EQUIPMEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Our 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Farmers stack hay bales eight high and park combines, sprayers, and grain carts under one 70×70 roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Delivery.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Barn & Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Barn & Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday hay barn & equipment storage
Everyday hay barn & equipment storage
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay barn & equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay barn & equipment storage + seasonal storage
hay barn & equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1882/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1882/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Barn & Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Barn & Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Barn & Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage cost?

A 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $90,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1882/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay barn & equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay barn & equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1882/month on a 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 hay barn & equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Barn & Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal barn with white trim, twin cupolas and open hay bay on a sunset farmstead

70×70 Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage | Steel and Stud, From $91,550

12

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,350$91,550SAVE $12,800
or $1907/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Fleet Maintenance Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

70×70 delivers 4900 sq ft of code-compliant fleet maintenance garage space. Fleet operators with 8-12 service trucks pick the 70×70 for double-deep bays and a parts mezzanine over the office. Mount four 12-ton lifts.

You’re viewing:Fleet Maintenance Garage·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,550$104,350Save $12,800
or as low as $1907/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,550
70×100
longer
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine-Ready
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-FLEET-MAINTENANCBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. 70×70 delivers 4900 sq ft of code-compliant fleet maintenance garage space.

7 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

7 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

7 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 7 vehicles + full hobby shop. Fleet operators with 8-12 service trucks pick the 70×70 for double-deep bays and a parts mezzanine over the office.

💡 Pro tip:8 Service Bays. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Maintenance Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Maintenance Garage spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Maintenance Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet maintenance garage
Everyday fleet maintenance garage
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet maintenance garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet maintenance garage + seasonal storage
fleet maintenance garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1907/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 fleet maintenance garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1907/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Maintenance Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Maintenance Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Maintenance Garage also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Maintenance Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage cost?

A 70×70 fleet maintenance garage from Steel and Stud starts at $91,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1907/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 fleet maintenance garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet maintenance garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet maintenance garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1907/month on a 70×70 fleet maintenance garage.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 fleet maintenance garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 fleet maintenance garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 70×70 fleet maintenance garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Maintenance Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

70×70 Fleet Maintenance Garage

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

70×70 Aircraft Hangar

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

70×70 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Aircraft Hangar, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 70×70 aircraft hangar packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Private pilots and small charter operations house Cessna Caravans, King Airs, and light twins.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$89,700
70×100
longer
$128,150
100×70
wider
$128,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Hydraulic Door Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your aircraft-hangar layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Full-width door, 14-ft+ clear height for tail clearance. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 70×70 aircraft hangar packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Aircraft bayTools / Engine bayOffice + Parts storage70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · aircraft-hangar layout

Aircraft bay · Tools / Engine bay · Office + Parts storage

Aircraft bay at the front, tools / engine bay in the middle, office + parts storage at the rear. Capacity: 1-2 light aircraft or 1 mid-size. Private pilots and small charter operations house Cessna Caravans, King Airs, and light twins in a 70×70 hangar.

💡 Pro tip:70 ft Door Span. Size affords: overhead crane rail, spray booth, pilot lounge.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 aircraft hangar cost?

A 70×70 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 70×70 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 70×70 aircraft hangar for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a aircraft hangar to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal building warehouse with red roll-up doors and a skid steer parked at sunset

70×70 Aircraft Hangar

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

70×70 Equestrian Arena

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Equestrian Arena | Steel and Stud, From $90,350

12

70×70 Equestrian Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$103,000$90,350SAVE $12,650
or $1882/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Equestrian Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Equestrian Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 70×70 equestrian arena fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Equine professionals use the 70×70 as a covered riding arena with room for barrel.

You’re viewing:Equestrian Arena·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,350$103,000Save $12,650
or as low as $1882/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$90,350
70×100
longer
$128,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Wainscoting
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-stall stable.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Full-height clearance supports hay loft (~160 bales). Our 70×70 equestrian arena fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

4 stalls + tack12-FT CENTER AISLEHay loft + Wash bay70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · multi-stall stable

4 stalls + tack · 12-ft center aisle · Hay loft + Wash bay

4 stalls + tack at the front, 12-ft center aisle in the middle, hay loft + wash bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 horses, full stable ops. Equine professionals use the 70×70 as a covered riding arena with room for barrel patterns, ground work, and a small viewing area.

💡 Pro tip:Full Practice Pen. Size affords: hay loft, wash bay with hot water, feed room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Equestrian Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena
Everyday equestrian arena
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena + seasonal storage
equestrian arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Equestrian Arena, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1882/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 equestrian arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1882/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Equestrian Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Equestrian Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 equestrian arena cost?

A 70×70 equestrian arena from Steel and Stud starts at $90,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1882/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 equestrian arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equestrian arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 equestrian arena?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 equestrian arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 equestrian arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 equestrian arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1882/month on a 70×70 equestrian arena.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 equestrian arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 equestrian arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 equestrian arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel barn interior aisle with wooden horse stalls, timber trusses, and a curious horse

70×70 Equestrian Arena

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

70×70 Manufacturing Space

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Manufacturing Space | Steel and Stud, From $91,950

12

70×70 Manufacturing Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,800$91,950SAVE $12,850
or $1916/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Manufacturing Space

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Manufacturing Space, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 70×70 manufacturing space fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Light manufacturers run CNC mills, assembly lines, and packaging stations inside.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Space·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,950$104,800Save $12,850
or as low as $1916/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,950
70×100
longer
$130,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Dual Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-MANUFACTURING-SPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Our 70×70 manufacturing space fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Light manufacturers run CNC mills, assembly lines, and packaging stations inside the 70×70.

💡 Pro tip:ASCE 7-22 Certified.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Manufacturing Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Space spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Space.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing space
Everyday manufacturing space
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing space + seasonal storage
manufacturing space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Manufacturing Space, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1916/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 manufacturing space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1916/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Manufacturing Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Manufacturing Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Space also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Space questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 manufacturing space cost?

A 70×70 manufacturing space from Steel and Stud starts at $91,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1916/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 manufacturing space price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 manufacturing space?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 manufacturing space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 manufacturing space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 manufacturing space without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1916/month on a 70×70 manufacturing space.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 manufacturing space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 manufacturing space in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 manufacturing space handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 70×70 manufacturing space ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

70×70 Manufacturing Space

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

70×70 Cold Storage Building

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $91,550

12

70×70 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,350$91,550SAVE $12,800
or $1907/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Cold Storage Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 70×70 cold storage building packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Commercial buyers convert the 70×70 shell into refrigerated or frozen storage.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,550$104,350Save $12,800
or as low as $1907/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,550
70×100
longer
$130,000
100×70
wider
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-30 IMP
  • Vapor Barrier
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your warehouse layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. 14-ft clear height fits 3-tier racking. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 70×70 cold storage building packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Dock-height loading bayPallet aislesOffice + Break room70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · warehouse layout

Dock-height loading bay · Pallet aisles · Office + Break room

Dock-height loading bay at the front, pallet aisles in the middle, office + break room at the rear. Capacity: ~98 pallets, light-duty forklift OK. Commercial buyers convert the 70×70 shell into refrigerated or frozen storage with insulated metal panels and an air-lock vestibule.

💡 Pro tip:1,200 Pallet Capacity. Size affords: dock leveler, pallet jack, restrooms.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1907/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1907/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 cold storage building cost?

A 70×70 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $91,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1907/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 cold storage building?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1907/month on a 70×70 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 70×70 cold storage building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green prefab metal building with lit loading docks and trucks at dawn

70×70 Cold Storage Building

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Gray steel building home with covered timber porch and warm lit windows at mountain sunset

70×70 Barndominium Shell

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Barndominium Shell | Steel and Stud, From $89,700

12

70×70 Barndominium Shell
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$102,250$89,700SAVE $12,550
or $1869/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Barndominium Shell

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Barndominium Shell, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 70×70 barndominium shell packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Barndominium buyers split the 70×70 into 3,4900 sq ft of living space and 4,4900 sq ft of.

You’re viewing:Barndominium Shell·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$89,700$102,250Save $12,550
or as low as $1869/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$89,700
70×100
longer
$128,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 5:12 Pitch
  • Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 70×70 barndominium shell packs 4900 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Bedroom(s)Great room / KitchenBath / Mech70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. Barndominium buyers split the 70×70 into 3,4900 sq ft of living space and 4,4900 sq ft of shop on a single foundation.

💡 Pro tip:Live + Work Split.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Barndominium Shell in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell
Everyday barndominium shell
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell + seasonal storage
barndominium shell + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Barndominium Shell, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1869/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 barndominium shell is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1869/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Barndominium Shell buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Barndominium Shell

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 barndominium shell cost?

A 70×70 barndominium shell from Steel and Stud starts at $89,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1869/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 barndominium shell price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud barndominium shell ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 barndominium shell?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 barndominium shell need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 barndominium shell delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 barndominium shell without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1869/month on a 70×70 barndominium shell.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 barndominium shell?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 barndominium shell in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 70×70 barndominium shell add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 70×70 barndominium shell typically adds $39,200–$58,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Gray steel building home with covered timber porch and warm lit windows at mountain sunset

70×70 Barndominium Shell

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$89,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

70×70 Dairy Barn

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Dairy Barn | Steel and Stud, From $90,350

12

70×70 Dairy Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$103,000$90,350SAVE $12,650
or $1882/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Dairy Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Dairy Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 70×70 dairy barn fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Dairy operators run free-stall layouts for 60-80 head inside a 70×70 with an alley wide.

You’re viewing:Dairy Barn·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$90,350$103,000Save $12,650
or as low as $1882/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$90,350
70×100
longer
$128,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-DAIRY-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Our 70×70 dairy barn fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Dairy operators run free-stall layouts for 60-80 head inside a 70×70 with an alley wide enough for skid-steer scraping.

💡 Pro tip:60-80 Head.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Dairy Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Dairy Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Dairy Barn spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Dairy Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday dairy barn
Everyday dairy barn
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a dairy barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdairy barn + seasonal storage
dairy barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Dairy Barn, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1882/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 dairy barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1882/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Dairy Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Dairy Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Dairy Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Dairy Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Dairy Barn also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Dairy Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 dairy barn cost?

A 70×70 dairy barn from Steel and Stud starts at $90,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1882/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 dairy barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud dairy barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 dairy barn?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud dairy barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 dairy barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 dairy barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 dairy barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1882/month on a 70×70 dairy barn.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 dairy barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 dairy barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 dairy barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Dairy Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal shed with single slope roof and open front bays on a grassy pasture

70×70 Dairy Barn

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$90,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel structure with open timber post bays sheltering a tractor, boat and horse trailer

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters | Steel and Stud, From $91,550

12

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,350$91,550SAVE $12,800
or $1907/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Contractor Yard Headquarters

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 70×70 contractor yard headquarters fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. General contractors and excavation outfits combine office, parts, and equipment.

You’re viewing:Contractor Yard Headquarters·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,550$104,350Save $12,800
or as low as $1907/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,550
70×100
longer
$130,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Office Partition
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-CONTRACTOR-YARD-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your contractor-storage layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Our 70×70 contractor yard headquarters fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Inventory racksLoading bayOffice / Desk70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · contractor-storage layout

Inventory racks · Loading bay · Office / Desk

Inventory racks at the front, loading bay in the middle, office / desk at the rear. General contractors and excavation outfits combine office, parts, and equipment storage in a single 70×70.

💡 Pro tip:Office + Shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Yard Headquarters.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Yard Headquarters spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Yard Headquarters.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor yard headquarters
Everyday contractor yard headquarters
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor yard headquarters.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor yard headquarters + seasonal storage
contractor yard headquarters + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1907/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 contractor yard headquarters is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1907/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Yard Headquarters shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Yard Headquarters · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Yard Headquarters also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏛️ 70×70

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Yard Headquarters questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters cost?

A 70×70 contractor yard headquarters from Steel and Stud starts at $91,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1907/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 contractor yard headquarters price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor yard headquarters ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor yard headquarters different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1907/month on a 70×70 contractor yard headquarters.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 contractor yard headquarters?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 contractor yard headquarters in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 70×70 contractor yard headquarters meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Yard Headquarters quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel structure with open timber post bays sheltering a tractor, boat and horse trailer

70×70 Contractor Yard Headquarters

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal building interior housing a plow truck, street sweeper, and wheel loader in marked bays

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud, From $91,650

12

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$104,500$91,650SAVE $12,850
or $1909/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings70×70Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed, engineered to code for assembly use.

Our 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Counties and townships store road salt, plow trucks, and graders in a.

You’re viewing:Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed·Size70×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$91,650$104,500Save $12,850
or as low as $1909/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 70×70
70×70
this size
$91,650
70×100
longer
$130,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 4,900 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Engineered Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-70X70-MUNICIPAL-SALT-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your municipal salt & equipment shed layout.

70 feet wide × 70 feet long. Our 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack70′ × 70′ · 4,900 sq ft · municipal salt & equipment shed layout

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed layout.

Our 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed fits 70-foot widths and 70-foot lengths to give you public-use-rated steel built to local assembly codes. Counties and townships store road salt, plow trucks, and graders in a 70×70 with a corrosion-resistant interior. 7,4900 sq ft holds roughly 2,500 tons of salt under a high gable plus parking for four heavy trucks. Specify galvanized accents, vertical roof for runoff, and engineered drawings for the bid package.

💡 Pro tip:2,500 Ton Salt.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
4,900 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 70×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width70′
Length70′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space4,900 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal salt & equipment shed
Everyday municipal salt & equipment shed
4,900 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal salt & equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal salt & equipment shed + seasonal storage
municipal salt & equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed, what makes it different.

4,900sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1909/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1909/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 70×70?

4,900 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 70′ × 70′ footprint with 4,900 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $39,200–$58,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 70×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 70×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
71×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,050+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏢 70×70

Distribution Warehouse

70×70 distribution warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Warehouse →

🏭 70×70

Fabrication Shop

70×70 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 70×70

Hay Barn & Equipment Storage

70×70 hay barn & equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay Barn & Equipment Storage →

🏢 70×70

Fleet Maintenance Garage

70×70 fleet maintenance garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Maintenance Garage →

🎯 70×70

Aircraft Hangar

70×70 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 70×70

Equestrian Arena

70×70 equestrian arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equestrian Arena →

🏭 70×70

Manufacturing Space

70×70 manufacturing space configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Space →

🏢 70×70

Cold Storage Building

70×70 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏡 70×70

Barndominium Shell

70×70 barndominium shell configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$89,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium Shell →

🌾 70×70

Dairy Barn

70×70 dairy barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$90,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Dairy Barn →

🏢 70×70

Contractor Yard Headquarters

70×70 contractor yard headquarters configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Yard Headquarters →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed cost?

A 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $91,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1909/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud municipal salt & equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed?

Almost always for 4,900+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal salt & equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1909/month on a 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 70×70 municipal salt & equipment shed pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$91,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal building interior housing a plow truck, street sweeper, and wheel loader in marked bays

70×70 Municipal Salt & Equipment Shed

4,900 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

70′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 70×70 steel building delivers 4,900 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$91,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

80×150 Distribution Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Distribution Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Distribution Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 distribution center packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Distribution operators spec the 80×150 PEMB for regional fulfillment hubs. The.

You’re viewing:Distribution Center·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 18′ Clear Height
  • 4+ Dock Doors
  • Mezzanine-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 distribution center packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Distribution operators spec the 80×150 PEMB for regional fulfillment hubs.

💡 Pro tip:Free 24-Hour Quote. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Distribution Center, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 distribution center cost?

A 80×150 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 distribution center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 distribution center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 distribution center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 distribution center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

80×150 Distribution Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

80×150 Manufacturing Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 manufacturing facility packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Manufacturers running CNC, fabrication, or assembly lines need column-free.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 manufacturing facility packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Manufacturers running CNC, fabrication, or assembly lines need column-free floor space and high eaves for overhead cranes.

💡 Pro tip:Engineered Drawings.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 manufacturing facility cost?

A 80×150 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

80×150 Manufacturing Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

80×150 Aircraft Hangar

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×150 aircraft hangar packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Pilots and FBOs use the 80×150 as a multi-aircraft hangar, fits a King Air 350.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 70′ Bifold Door
  • 20′ Eave
  • Hurricane Cert Avail.
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 80ft width. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 80×150 aircraft hangar packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Pilots and FBOs use the 80×150 as a multi-aircraft hangar, fits a King Air 350 alongside two single-engine pistons, or four mid-size singles in a row.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Compliant Design. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 80×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

80×150 Aircraft Hangar

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

80×150 Cold Storage Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 cold storage building packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and ag-industrial operators build out the 80×150 as cold.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Walls
  • Spray Foam Roof
  • Vapor Barrier
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 cold storage building packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Food distributors and ag-industrial operators build out the 80×150 as cold storage with insulated metal panels and a vapor-sealed envelope.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 cold storage building cost?

A 80×150 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 cold storage building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel structure warehouse at dawn with dock doors, semi trailers, and wet pavement

80×150 Cold Storage Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure with open equipment bays sheltering a tractor, truck and baler near mountains

80×150 Equipment Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud, From $220,300

12

80×150 Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Equipment Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 80×150 equipment barn? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Row-crop farmers park combines, sprayers, planters, and a service tractor side-by-side in 9,12000 sq.

You’re viewing:Equipment Barn·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$176,350
80×150
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Open-Gable Ends
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-EQUIPMENT-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your livestock-barn layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Looking for a 80×150 equipment barn? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Livestock areaCENTER ALLEYFeed / Storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · livestock-barn layout

Livestock area · Center alley · Feed / Storage

Livestock area at the front, center alley in the middle, feed / storage at the rear. Row-crop farmers park combines, sprayers, planters, and a service tractor side-by-side in 9,12000 sq ft with room for fuel and a parts bench.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install Included.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment barn
Everyday equipment barn
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment barn + seasonal storage
equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Equipment Barn, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 equipment barn cost?

A 80×150 equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 equipment barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 equipment barn?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 80×150 equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue steel structure with open equipment bays sheltering a tractor, truck and baler near mountains

80×150 Equipment Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $219,650

12

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$250,400$219,650SAVE $30,750
or $4576/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Indoor Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 80×150 indoor riding arena? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Trainers and breeding operations build 80×150 as a regulation-friendly riding arena, 80′.

You’re viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$219,650$250,400Save $30,750
or as low as $4576/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$175,700
80×150
this size
$219,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • 6′ Kickwall Wainscot
  • Skylight Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your open-arena layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Looking for a 80×150 indoor riding arena? At 12000 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Court / FieldSideline / BenchEquipment storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · open-arena layout

Court / Field · Sideline / Bench · Equipment storage

Court / Field at the front, sideline / bench in the middle, equipment storage at the rear. Trainers and breeding operations build 80×150 as a regulation-friendly riding arena, 80′ is the standard width for dressage and reining work, and 120′ gives a full lengthening lane.

💡 Pro tip:Vertical Roof.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4576/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4576/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 80×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $219,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4576/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4576/month on a 80×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×150 indoor riding arena for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor riding arena to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$219,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open sliding doors, center aisle stalls, and fenced drive

80×150 Indoor Riding Arena

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$219,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

80×150 Commercial Workshop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $221,900

12

80×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Commercial Workshop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 commercial workshop packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Heavy-equipment dealers and fleet operators use the 80×150 as a 10-bay service.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,950
80×150
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 10 Service Bays
  • 20′ Eave
  • 12×14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 80×150 commercial workshop packs 12000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Heavy-equipment dealers and fleet operators use the 80×150 as a 10-bay service workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Slab Spec. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 80×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 80×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 commercial workshop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×150 commercial workshop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red metal workshop with white trim, roll-up door and window on a country lot

80×150 Commercial Workshop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

80×150 Industrial Steel Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Industrial Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Industrial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Industrial Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Industrial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space. 9,12000 sq ft of clear span gets subdivided later with interior partitions, bays, offices, restrooms, parts storage. Future-proof with.

You’re viewing:Industrial Steel Building·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Flex Layout
  • Framed Openings
  • Partition-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-INDUSTRIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your industrial steel building layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. 80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · industrial steel building layout

Industrial Steel Building layout.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant industrial steel building space. 9,12000 sq ft of clear span gets subdivided later with interior partitions, bays, offices, restrooms, parts storage. Future-proof with framed openings on every wall.

💡 Pro tip:Custom-Engineered.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Industrial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Industrial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Industrial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Industrial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday industrial steel building
Everyday industrial steel building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a industrial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindustrial steel building + seasonal storage
industrial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Industrial Steel Building, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 industrial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Industrial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Industrial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Industrial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Industrial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Industrial Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Industrial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 industrial steel building cost?

A 80×150 industrial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 industrial steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud industrial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 industrial steel building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud industrial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 industrial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 industrial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 industrial steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 industrial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 industrial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 industrial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 industrial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Industrial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building fabrication interior with five-ton overhead crane, welders, and plasma cutting table

80×150 Industrial Steel Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Shop House / Barndominium

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium, engineered for code-compliant business use.

80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant shop house / barndominium space. The 80′-wide clear span gives the residence side full-height vaulted ceilings if you want them, with R-19 batt insulation throughout.

You’re viewing:Shop House / Barndominium·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Hybrid Layout
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-SHOP-HOUSE-BARNDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. 80×150 delivers 12000 sq ft of code-compliant shop house / barndominium space.

Bedroom(s)GREAT ROOM / KITCHENBath / Mech80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · barndominium shell

Bedroom(s) · Great room / Kitchen · Bath / Mech

Bedroom(s) at the front, great room / kitchen in the middle, bath / mech at the rear. The 80′-wide clear span gives the residence side full-height vaulted ceilings if you want them, with R-19 batt insulation throughout.

💡 Pro tip:Residential-Grade Finish.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Shop House / Barndominium.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Shop House / Barndominium spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Shop House / Barndominium.

DAILY USEEveryday shop house / barndominium
Everyday shop house / barndominium
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a shop house / barndominium.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshop house / barndominium + seasonal storage
shop house / barndominium + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 shop house / barndominium is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Shop House / Barndominium shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Shop House / Barndominium · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Shop House / Barndominium also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Shop House / Barndominium questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 shop house / barndominium cost?

A 80×150 shop house / barndominium from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 shop house / barndominium price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud shop house / barndominium ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 shop house / barndominium?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud shop house / barndominium different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 shop house / barndominium need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 shop house / barndominium delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 shop house / barndominium without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 shop house / barndominium.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 shop house / barndominium?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 shop house / barndominium in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 shop house / barndominium meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Shop House / Barndominium quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Amber metal building cottage home with black roof and rocking chairs on the covered porch

80×150 Shop House / Barndominium

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn | Steel and Stud, From $220,300

12

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Hay & Grain Barn

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 80×150 hay & grain barn fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Ag-industrial operators stack large rounds 4-high under a 16′-20′ eave, with.

You’re viewing:Hay & Grain Barn·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$176,350
80×150
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Bay Design
  • 20′ Stack Height
  • Sliding End Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-HAY-GRAIN-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Our 80×150 hay & grain barn fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

Hay storageFEED ALLEYEquipment80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Hay storage · Feed alley · Equipment

Hay storage at the front, feed alley in the middle, equipment at the rear. Ag-industrial operators stack large rounds 4-high under a 16′-20′ eave, with center-aisle access for skid-steer feeding.

💡 Pro tip:Ventilated Gables.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Grain Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Grain Barn spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Grain Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & grain barn
Everyday hay & grain barn
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & grain barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & grain barn + seasonal storage
hay & grain barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 hay & grain barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Grain Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Grain Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Grain Barn also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🏢 80×150

Fabrication Shop

80×150 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Grain Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 hay & grain barn cost?

A 80×150 hay & grain barn from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 hay & grain barn price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & grain barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 hay & grain barn?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & grain barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 hay & grain barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 hay & grain barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 hay & grain barn without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 80×150 hay & grain barn.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 hay & grain barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 hay & grain barn in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×150 hay & grain barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Grain Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building with lean-to shelter housing a tractor, UTV and hay bale at dusk

80×150 Hay & Grain Barn

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

80×150 Fabrication Shop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×150 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $221,500

12

80×150 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×150Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×150 Fabrication Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 80×150 fabrication shop fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Metal fabricators and welding shops need crane runways, high eaves, and reinforced framing.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size80×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×150
80×120
smaller
$177,550
80×150
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane Rail Mounts
  • Reinforced Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X150-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

80 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. Our 80×150 fabrication shop fits 80-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage80′ × 150′ · 12,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Metal fabricators and welding shops need crane runways, high eaves, and reinforced framing for overhead loads.

💡 Pro tip:5-10 Ton Crane Spec. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×150 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width80′
Length150′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×150 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×150 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×150?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 150′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×150 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×150 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 80×150

Clear-Span Warehouse

80×150 clear-span warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Clear-Span Warehouse →

🏭 80×150

Distribution Center

80×150 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 80×150

Manufacturing Facility

80×150 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 80×150

Aircraft Hangar

80×150 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 80×150

Cold Storage Building

80×150 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 80×150

Equipment Barn

80×150 equipment barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Barn →

🎯 80×150

Indoor Riding Arena

80×150 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏭 80×150

Commercial Workshop

80×150 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 80×150

Industrial Steel Building

80×150 industrial steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Industrial Steel Building →

🏢 80×150

Shop House / Barndominium

80×150 shop house / barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Shop House / Barndominium →

🌾 80×150

Hay & Grain Barn

80×150 hay & grain barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Grain Barn →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 80×150 fabrication shop cost?

A 80×150 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×150 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×150 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×150 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×150 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×150 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 80×150 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 80×150 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×150 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×150 fabrication shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with three open bays showing a car lift, workbenches and tool storage

80×150 Fabrication Shop

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×150 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $119,000

12

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$135,650$119,000SAVE $16,650
or $2479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. 8,6400 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,000$135,650Save $16,650
or as low as $2479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Our 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

8 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

8 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

8 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 8 vehicles + full hobby shop. 8,6400 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×80

Manufacturing Floor

80×80 manufacturing floor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Floor →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $119,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2479/month on a 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Sage green metal garage with two black sectional doors and rooster weathervane by an autumn lake

80×80 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

80×80 Manufacturing Floor

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

80×80 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $119,400

12

80×80 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$136,100$119,400SAVE $16,700
or $2488/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings80×80Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×80 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 80×80 manufacturing floor fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Column-free 8,6400 sq ft production floor for CNC equipment, fabrication, assembly.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size80×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$119,400$136,100Save $16,700
or as low as $2488/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×80
80×80
this size
$119,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 6,400 sq ft enclosed
  • From $56,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X80-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fabrication-shop layout.

80 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 80×80 manufacturing floor fits 80-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

Weld / fab bayMATERIAL STORAGEOffice / break80′ × 80′ · 6,400 sq ft · fabrication-shop layout

Weld / fab bay · Material storage · Office / break

Weld / fab bay at the front, material storage in the middle, office / break at the rear. Column-free 8,6400 sq ft production floor for CNC equipment, fabrication, assembly lines, conveyors, robotic cells, pallet staging, and light industrial workflows.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor at 80×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×80 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
6,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width80′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space6,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
6,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×80 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

6,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$2488/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×80 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $2488/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×80?

6,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 80′ footprint with 6,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $51,200–$76,800 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 80×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×80 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×80 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$28,800+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏢 80×80

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×80 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →

🏢 80×80

Distribution Hub

80×80 distribution hub configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Hub →

🏢 80×80

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×80 commercial showroom / retail configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →

🏢 80×80

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×80 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →

🎯 80×80

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×80 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →

🌾 80×80

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×80 agricultural processing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →

🏢 80×80

Trucking Terminal

80×80 trucking terminal configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Trucking Terminal →

🏭 80×80

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×80 warehouse / inventory storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →

🏛️ 80×80

Municipal / Government Facility

80×80 municipal / government facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Municipal / Government Facility →

🌾 80×80

Indoor Riding Arena

80×80 indoor riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$117,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Riding Arena →

🏛️ 80×80

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×80 worship center / fellowship hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$119,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 80×80 manufacturing floor cost?

A 80×80 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $119,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $2488/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×80 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×80 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 6,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×80 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×80 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×80 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $2488/month on a 80×80 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 80×80 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×80 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×80 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×80 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Fulfillment center interior of a commercial metal building with conveyor line, forklift, and racking

80×80 Manufacturing Floor

6,400 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

80′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×80 steel building delivers 6,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$119,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

RV Covers Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Our customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their RV Covers.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"Excellent to deal with — I feel fortunate Bill answered the phone when I called. He kept me informed of the order status from purchase through installation. Pleased with the quality and I would not hesitate buying again."

RB
Returning Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Custom Metal Building
★★★★★

"Bill was very helpful with the sales portion of my order — communication promptly answered, straightforward about delivery. The installation team were professional and met every challenge head on. A well-prepared site is key; I'm thankful for his advice on that."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Carport
Common Questions

RV Covers FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard RV Covers units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span RV Covers may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a RV Covers with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific RV Covers model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your RV Covers with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential RV Covers sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car RV Covers (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car RV Covers (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide RV Covers (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

RV Covers Sizes and Dimensions Guide

RV Covers dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car RV Covers and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car RV Covers (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car RV Covers (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide RV Covers (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length RV Covers. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a RV Covers Cost in 2026?

RV Covers prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car RV Covers up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel RV Covers prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider RV Covers cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY RV Covers kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 RV Covers per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

RV Covers Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car RV Covers in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your RV Covers is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart